blob: b77ddcb6c0579b91c9994fdc24a8380a770d0649 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
16#ifndef CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define CLANG_C_INDEX_H
18
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 24
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288
289/**
290 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000291 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000292CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000293
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000294/**
295 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
296 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000297CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000298
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000299/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000300 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
301 * across an indexing session.
302 */
303typedef struct {
304 unsigned long long data[3];
305} CXFileUniqueID;
306
307/**
308 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
309 *
310 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
311 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
312 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
313 * otherwise returns 0.
314*/
315CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
316
317/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000318 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
319 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000320 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000321 */
322CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
323clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
324
325/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000326 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
327 *
328 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000329 *
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000330 * \param file_name the name of the file.
331 *
332 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
333 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
334 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000335CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000336 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000337
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000338/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000339 * @}
340 */
341
342/**
343 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
344 *
345 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
346 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
347 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
348 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
349 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
350 * specific location information from those data types.
351 *
352 * @{
353 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000354
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000355/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000356 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
357 * unit.
358 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000359 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000360 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000361 */
362typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000363 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000364 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000365} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000366
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000367/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000368 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000369 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000370 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
371 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000372 */
373typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000374 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000375 unsigned begin_int_data;
376 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000377} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000378
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000379/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000380 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
381 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000382CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000383
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000384/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000385 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000386 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000387 * code.
388 *
389 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
390 * if they refer to different locations.
391 */
392CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
393 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000394
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000395/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000396 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
397 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000398 */
399CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
400 CXFile file,
401 unsigned line,
402 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000403/**
404 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
405 * in a particular translation unit.
406 */
407CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
408 CXFile file,
409 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000410
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000411/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000412 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
413 */
414CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
415
416/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000417 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
418 * the corresponding translation unit.
419 */
420CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
421
422/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000423 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
424 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000425CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000426
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000427/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000428 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
429 * locations.
430 */
431CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
432 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000433
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000434/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000435 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
436 *
437 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
438 */
439CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
440 CXSourceRange range2);
441
442/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000443 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000444 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000445CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000446
447/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000448 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
449 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000450 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000451 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
452 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000453 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000454 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
455 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000456 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000457 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000458 * source location points.
459 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000460 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000461 * source location points.
462 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000463 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
464 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000465 *
466 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
467 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000468 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000469CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
470 CXFile *file,
471 unsigned *line,
472 unsigned *column,
473 unsigned *offset);
474
475/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000476 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
477 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
478 *
479 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
480 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000481 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000482 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
483 *
484 * static int func(void)
485 * {
486 * return 0;
487 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000488 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000489 *
490 * the location information returned by this function would be
491 *
492 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
493 *
494 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
495 *
496 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
497 *
498 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
499 * into its parts.
500 *
501 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
502 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
503 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
504 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
505 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
506 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
507 * source location, an empty string is returned.
508 *
509 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
510 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
511 *
512 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
513 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
514 */
515CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
516 CXString *filename,
517 unsigned *line,
518 unsigned *column);
519
520/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000521 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
522 * by the given source location.
523 *
524 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000525 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000526 * details.
527 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000528CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
529 CXFile *file,
530 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000531 unsigned *column,
532 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000533
534/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000535 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
536 * the given source location.
537 *
538 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
539 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
540 *
541 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
542 * into its parts.
543 *
544 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
545 * source location points.
546 *
547 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
548 * source location points.
549 *
550 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
551 * source location points.
552 *
553 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
554 * buffer to which the given source location points.
555 */
556CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
557 CXFile *file,
558 unsigned *line,
559 unsigned *column,
560 unsigned *offset);
561
562/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000563 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
564 * the given source location.
565 *
566 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
567 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
568 * a macro argument.
569 *
570 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
571 * into its parts.
572 *
573 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
574 * source location points.
575 *
576 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
577 * source location points.
578 *
579 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
580 * source location points.
581 *
582 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
583 * buffer to which the given source location points.
584 */
585CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
586 CXFile *file,
587 unsigned *line,
588 unsigned *column,
589 unsigned *offset);
590
591/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000592 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
593 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000594 */
595CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
596
597/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000598 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
599 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000600 */
601CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
602
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000603/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000604 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000605 */
606typedef struct {
607 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
608 unsigned count;
609 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000610 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000611 */
612 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000613} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000614
615/**
616 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000617 *
618 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
619 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000620 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000621CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
622 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000623
624/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000625 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000626 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000627CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000628
629/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000630 * @}
631 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000632
633/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000634 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
635 *
636 * @{
637 */
638
639/**
640 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
641 */
642enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
643 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000644 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000645 * option.
646 */
647 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000648
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000649 /**
650 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
651 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
652 */
653 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
654
655 /**
656 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
657 * wrong.
658 */
659 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
660
661 /**
662 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
663 */
664 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
665
666 /**
667 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
668 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
669 * results.
670 */
671 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
672};
673
674/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000675 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
676 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
677 */
678typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
679
680/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000681 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
682 */
683typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
684
685/**
686 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
687 */
688CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
689
690/**
691 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
692 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000693 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000694 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
695 *
696 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
697 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
698 */
699CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
700 unsigned Index);
701
702
703/**
704 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
705 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
706 */
707enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
708 /**
709 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
710 */
711 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
712
713 /**
714 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
715 * deserialize diagnostics.
716 */
717 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
718
719 /**
720 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
721 * could not be opened.
722 */
723 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
724
725 /**
726 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000727 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000728 */
729 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
730};
731
732/**
733 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000734 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000735 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000736 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
737 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000738 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000739 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000740 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
741 *
742 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000743 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 */
745CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
746 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
747 CXString *errorString);
748
749/**
750 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
751 */
752CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
753
754/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000755 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
756 *
757 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000758 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000759 */
760CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
761
762/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000763 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
764 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000765 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000766CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
767
768/**
769 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
770 *
771 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
772 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
773 *
774 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
775 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
776 */
777CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
778 unsigned Index);
779
780/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000781 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
782 * translation unit.
783 *
784 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
785 */
786CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
787 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
788
789/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000790 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
791 */
792CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000793
794/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000795 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
796 *
797 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000798 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000799 */
800enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
801 /**
802 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
803 * diagnostic was located.
804 *
805 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
806 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
807 *
808 * \code
809 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
810 * \endcode
811 *
812 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
813 */
814 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
815
816 /**
817 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
818 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
819 *
820 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
821 */
822 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
823
824 /**
825 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
826 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
827 * machine-parsable format.
828 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000829 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000830 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
831 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000832 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
833
834 /**
835 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
836 *
837 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
838 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
839 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
840 */
841 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
842
843 /**
844 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
845 *
846 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
847 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
848 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
849 */
850 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
851
852 /**
853 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
854 *
855 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
856 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
857 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
858 */
859 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000860};
861
862/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000863 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000864 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000865 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000866 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
867 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000868 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
869 *
870 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
871 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000872 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000873 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000874 *
875 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000876 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000877CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
878 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000879
880/**
881 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
882 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
883 *
884 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000885 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000886 */
887CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
888
889/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000890 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
891 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000892CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000893clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
894
895/**
896 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
897 *
898 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
899 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
900 */
901CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
902
903/**
904 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
905 */
906CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000907
908/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000909 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
910 * diagnostic.
911 *
912 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
913 *
914 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
915 * diagnostic (if any).
916 *
917 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
918 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
919 */
920CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
921 CXString *Disable);
922
923/**
924 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
925 *
926 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
927 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
928 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
929 *
930 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
931 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
932 */
933CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
934
935/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000936 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
937 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
938 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000939 *
940 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
941 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
942 *
943 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
944 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000945CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
946CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
947
948/**
949 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
950 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000951 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
952 */
953CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000954
955/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000956 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
957 * diagnostic.
958 */
959CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000960
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000961/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000962 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000963 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000964 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000965 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000966 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000970 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000972 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000974CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000975 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000976
977/**
978 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
979 * given diagnostic.
980 */
981CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
982
983/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000984 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000985 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000986 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
987 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
988 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
989 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
990 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
991 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
992 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
993 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
994 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000995 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000996 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
997 *
998 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
999 *
1000 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1001 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1002 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1003 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1004 *
1005 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1006 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001007 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001008CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001009 unsigned FixIt,
1010 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001011
1012/**
1013 * @}
1014 */
1015
1016/**
1017 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1018 *
1019 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1020 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1021 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1022 *
1023 * @{
1024 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001025
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001026/**
1027 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1028 */
1029CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1030clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1031
1032/**
1033 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1034 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1035 *
1036 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1037 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1038 * specified command line arguments.
1039 *
1040 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1041 * are ignored:
1042 *
1043 * '-c'
1044 * '-emit-ast'
1045 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001046 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001047 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001048 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1049 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001050 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001051 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001052 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1053 *
1054 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1055 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1056 *
1057 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1058 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1059 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1060 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001061 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001062 *
1063 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1064 * unsaved_files.
1065 *
1066 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1067 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001068 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1069 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1070 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001071 */
1072CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1073 CXIndex CIdx,
1074 const char *source_filename,
1075 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001076 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001077 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001078 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001079
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001080/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001081 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1082 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1083 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1084 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001085 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001086CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1087 CXIndex CIdx,
1088 const char *ast_filename);
1089
1090/**
1091 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1092 *
1093 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1094 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1095 *
1096 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1097 */
1098CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1099 CXIndex CIdx,
1100 const char *ast_filename,
1101 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001102
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001103/**
1104 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1105 *
1106 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1107 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1108 * constructing the translation unit.
1109 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001110enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1111 /**
1112 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1113 * needed.
1114 */
1115 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1116
1117 /**
1118 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1119 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1120 *
1121 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1122 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1123 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1124 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1125 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1126 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001127 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1128
1129 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001130 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001131 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001132 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1133 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1134 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1135 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1136 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1137 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1138 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001139 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001140 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001141
1142 /**
1143 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1144 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1145 *
1146 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1147 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1148 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1149 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1150 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1151 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1152 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1153 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1154 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1155 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001156 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1157
1158 /**
1159 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1160 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1161 *
1162 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1163 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1164 * code-completion operations.
1165 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001166 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001167
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001168 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001169 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1170 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001171 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001172 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1173 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001174 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001175 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001176
1177 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001178 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001179 *
1180 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001181 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001182 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001183 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1184
1185 /**
1186 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1187 * parsing.
1188 *
1189 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1190 * ignoring the usages.
1191 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001192 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1193
1194 /**
1195 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1196 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1197 * unit.
1198 */
1199 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001200};
1201
1202/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001203 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1204 * unit that is being edited.
1205 *
1206 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1207 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1208 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1209 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1210 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1211 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1212 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1213 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001214CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001215
1216/**
1217 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1218 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1219 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1220 * error codes.
1221 */
1222CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1223clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1224 const char *source_filename,
1225 const char *const *command_line_args,
1226 int num_command_line_args,
1227 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1228 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1229 unsigned options);
1230
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001231/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001232 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1233 * to that file.
1234 *
1235 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1236 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1237 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1238 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1239 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1240 *
1241 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1242 * associated.
1243 *
1244 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001245 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001246 *
1247 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1248 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1249 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1250 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001251 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001252 *
1253 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001254 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001255 *
1256 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001257 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001258 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1259 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1260 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1261 *
1262 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1263 * unsaved_files.
1264 *
1265 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1266 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1267 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1268 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001269 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1270 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1271 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1272 *
1273 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001274 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001275CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1276clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1277 const char *source_filename,
1278 const char *const *command_line_args,
1279 int num_command_line_args,
1280 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1281 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1282 unsigned options,
1283 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1284
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001285/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001286 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1287 *
1288 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1289 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1290 * saving the translation unit.
1291 */
1292enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1293 /**
1294 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1295 */
1296 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1297};
1298
1299/**
1300 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1301 * unit.
1302 *
1303 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1304 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1305 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1306 * the most commonly-requested data.
1307 */
1308CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1309
1310/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001311 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1312 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1313 */
1314enum CXSaveError {
1315 /**
1316 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1317 */
1318 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1319
1320 /**
1321 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1322 * the file.
1323 *
1324 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1325 * write the file.
1326 */
1327 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1328
1329 /**
1330 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1331 * to save the translation unit.
1332 *
1333 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1334 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1335 */
1336 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1337
1338 /**
1339 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1340 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1341 */
1342 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1343};
1344
1345/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001346 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1347 * that translation unit on disk.
1348 *
1349 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1350 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1351 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1352 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1353 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1354 * units.
1355 *
1356 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001357 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001358 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1359 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001360 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1361 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1362 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1363 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001364 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1365 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1366 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001367 */
1368CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001369 const char *FileName,
1370 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001371
1372/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001373 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1374 */
1375CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001376
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001377/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001378 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1379 *
1380 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1381 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1382 * reparsing the translation unit.
1383 */
1384enum CXReparse_Flags {
1385 /**
1386 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1387 */
1388 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1389};
1390
1391/**
1392 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1393 * unit.
1394 *
1395 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1396 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1397 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1398 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1399 * to the next.
1400 */
1401CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1402
1403/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001404 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1405 *
1406 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1407 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1408 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1409 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1410 * was originally parsed.
1411 *
1412 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1413 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1414 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1415 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1416 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1417 * unit using this routine.
1418 *
1419 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1420 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1421 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1422 *
1423 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1424 * unsaved_files.
1425 *
1426 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1427 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1428 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1429 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1430 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1431 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001432 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1433 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1434 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1435 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001436 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001437 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001438 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1439 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1440 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001441 */
1442CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1443 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001444 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1445 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001446
1447/**
1448 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1449 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001450enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1451 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1452 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1453 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1454 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001455 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001456 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001457 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001458 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1459 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1460 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001461 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1462 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001463 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001464 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001465 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1466 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001467 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001468
1469 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001470 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001471};
1472
1473/**
1474 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001475 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001476 */
1477CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001478const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001479
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001480typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001481 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001482 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1483 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1484 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001485 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001486} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001487
1488/**
1489 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1490 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001491typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001492 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1493 void *data;
1494
1495 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1496 unsigned numEntries;
1497
1498 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1499 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001500 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001501
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001502} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001503
1504/**
1505 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001506 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001507 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001508CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001509
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001510CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001511
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001512/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001513 * @}
1514 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001515
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001516/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001517 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1518 */
1519enum CXCursorKind {
1520 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001521 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001522 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001523 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001524 *
1525 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1526 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1527 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1528 * of the declaration is not reported.
1529 */
1530 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1531 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001532 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001533 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1534 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1535 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1536 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1537 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1538 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001539 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001540 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1541 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1542 */
1543 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1544 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1545 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1546 /** \brief A function. */
1547 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1548 /** \brief A variable. */
1549 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1550 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1551 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001552 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001553 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001554 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001555 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001556 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001557 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001558 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001559 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1560 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1561 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1562 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1563 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1564 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1565 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001566 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001567 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001568 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001569 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
1570 /** \brief A typedef */
1571 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001572 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1573 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001574 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1575 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001576 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1577 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001578 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1579 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1580 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1581 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1582 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1583 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001584 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1585 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1586 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1587 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1588 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1589 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1590 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1591 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001592 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1593 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001594 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1595 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001596 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1597 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001598 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1599 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001600 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001601 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001602 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1603 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001604 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001605 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001606 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001607 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001608 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1609 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001610
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001611 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001612 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001613
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001614 /* References */
1615 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001616 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001617 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1618 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1619 /**
1620 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1621 *
1622 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1623 * declared. For example, given:
1624 *
1625 * \code
1626 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1627 * size_type size;
1628 * \endcode
1629 *
1630 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1631 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1632 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1633 */
1634 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001635 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001636 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001637 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1638 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001639 */
1640 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001641 /**
1642 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1643 */
1644 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001645 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001646 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1647 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001648 */
1649 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001650 /**
1651 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1652 *
1653 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1654 * goto statement in the following example:
1655 *
1656 * \code
1657 * start_over:
1658 * ++counter;
1659 *
1660 * goto start_over;
1661 * \endcode
1662 *
1663 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1664 */
1665 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1666
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001667 /**
1668 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1669 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1670 *
1671 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1672 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1673 *
1674 * \code
1675 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1676 *
1677 * struct X { ... };
1678 * void swap(X&, X&);
1679 *
1680 * template<typename T>
1681 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1682 * while (first < last - 1) {
1683 * swap(*first, *--last);
1684 * ++first;
1685 * }
1686 * }
1687 *
1688 * struct Y { };
1689 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1690 * \endcode
1691 *
1692 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1693 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1694 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1695 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1696 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1697 * example).
1698 *
1699 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1700 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1701 * referenced by this cursor.
1702 */
1703 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1704
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001705 /**
1706 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1707 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1708 */
1709 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1710
1711 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001712
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001713 /* Error conditions */
1714 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1715 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1716 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1717 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001718 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1719 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001720
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001721 /* Expressions */
1722 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001723
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001724 /**
1725 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001726 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001727 *
1728 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1729 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1730 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1731 * expression is not reported.
1732 */
1733 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001734
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001735 /**
1736 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
1737 * as a function, varible, or enumerator.
1738 */
1739 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001740
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001741 /**
1742 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1743 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1744 */
1745 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001746
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001747 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1748 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001749
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001750 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1751 object or class. */
1752 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001753
1754 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1755 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1756
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001757 /** \brief An integer literal.
1758 */
1759 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1760
1761 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1762 */
1763 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1764
1765 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1766 */
1767 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1768
1769 /** \brief A string literal.
1770 */
1771 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1772
1773 /** \brief A character literal.
1774 */
1775 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1776
1777 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1778 *
1779 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1780 */
1781 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1782
1783 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1784 * alignof).
1785 */
1786 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1787
1788 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1789 */
1790 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1791
1792 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1793 * "x <= y".
1794 */
1795 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1796
1797 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1798 */
1799 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1800
1801 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1802 */
1803 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1804
1805 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1806 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1807 *
1808 * For example: (int)f.
1809 */
1810 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1811
1812 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1813 */
1814 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1815
1816 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1817 */
1818 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1819
1820 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1821 */
1822 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1823
1824 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1825 */
1826 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1827
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001828 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001829 */
1830 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1831
1832 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1833 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1834 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1835 *
1836 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1837 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1838 * match the size of a pointer).
1839 */
1840 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1841
1842 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1843 */
1844 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1845
1846 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1847 */
1848 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1849
1850 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1851 */
1852 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1853
1854 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1855 */
1856 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1857
1858 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1859 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1860 *
1861 * Example:
1862 * \code
1863 * x = int(0.5);
1864 * \endcode
1865 */
1866 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1867
1868 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1869 */
1870 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1871
1872 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1873 */
1874 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1875
1876 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1877 */
1878 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1879
1880 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1881 */
1882 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1883
1884 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1885 *
1886 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1887 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1888 */
1889 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1890
1891 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1892 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1893 */
1894 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1895
1896 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1897 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1898 */
1899 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1900
1901 /** \brief A unary expression.
1902 */
1903 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1904
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001905 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001906 */
1907 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1908
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001909 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001910 */
1911 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1912
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001913 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001914 */
1915 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1916
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001917 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001918 */
1919 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1920
1921 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1922 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1923 *
1924 * \code
1925 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1926 * \endcode
1927 */
1928 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1929
1930 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1931 * expressions.
1932 *
1933 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1934 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1935 *
1936 * \code
1937 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1938 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1939 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1940 * }
1941 * \endcode
1942 */
1943 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1944
1945 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1946 * pack.
1947 *
1948 * \code
1949 * template<typename ...Types>
1950 * struct count {
1951 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1952 * };
1953 * \endcode
1954 */
1955 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1956
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001957 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1958 * object.
1959 *
1960 * \code
1961 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1962 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1963 * [](float a, float b) {
1964 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1965 * });
1966 * }
1967 * \endcode
1968 */
1969 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
1970
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00001971 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
1972 */
1973 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
1974
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00001975 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in a ObjC method.
1976 */
1977 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
1978
1979 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001980
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001981 /* Statements */
1982 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
1983 /**
1984 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
1985 * interface.
1986 *
1987 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
1988 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
1989 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
1990 * reported.
1991 */
1992 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001993
1994 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
1995 *
1996 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
1997 * the following example:
1998 *
1999 * \code
2000 * start_over:
2001 * ++counter;
2002 * \endcode
2003 *
2004 */
2005 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002006
2007 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2008 *
2009 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2010 * bodies.
2011 */
2012 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2013
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002014 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002015 */
2016 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2017
2018 /** \brief A default statement.
2019 */
2020 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2021
2022 /** \brief An if statement
2023 */
2024 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2025
2026 /** \brief A switch statement.
2027 */
2028 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2029
2030 /** \brief A while statement.
2031 */
2032 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2033
2034 /** \brief A do statement.
2035 */
2036 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2037
2038 /** \brief A for statement.
2039 */
2040 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2041
2042 /** \brief A goto statement.
2043 */
2044 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2045
2046 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2047 */
2048 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2049
2050 /** \brief A continue statement.
2051 */
2052 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2053
2054 /** \brief A break statement.
2055 */
2056 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2057
2058 /** \brief A return statement.
2059 */
2060 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2061
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002062 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002063 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002064 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002065 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002066
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002067 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002068 */
2069 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2070
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002071 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002072 */
2073 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2074
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002075 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002076 */
2077 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2078
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002079 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002080 */
2081 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2082
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002083 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002084 */
2085 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2086
2087 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2088 */
2089 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2090
2091 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2092 */
2093 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2094
2095 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2096 */
2097 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2098
2099 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2100 */
2101 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2102
2103 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2104 */
2105 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2106
2107 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2108 */
2109 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2110
2111 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2112 */
2113 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2114
2115 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2116 */
2117 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2118
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002119 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2120 */
2121 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2122
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002123 /** \brief The null satement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
2124 *
2125 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2126 */
2127 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2128
2129 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2130 * expressions.
2131 */
2132 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2133
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002134 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2135 */
2136 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2137
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002138 /** \brief OpenMP simd directive.
2139 */
2140 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2141
2142 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002143
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002144 /**
2145 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2146 *
2147 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2148 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2149 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002150 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2151
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002152 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002153 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2154 /**
2155 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2156 * interface.
2157 */
2158 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2159
2160 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2161 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002162 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002163 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2164 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002165 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002166 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002167 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
2168 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_PackedAttr,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002169
2170 /* Preprocessing */
2171 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002172 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002173 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2174 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002175 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002176 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002177 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2178
2179 /* Extra Declarations */
2180 /**
2181 * \brief A module import declaration.
2182 */
2183 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
2184 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
2185 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002186};
2187
2188/**
2189 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2190 * a translation unit.
2191 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002192 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002193 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2194 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2195 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2196 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2197 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2198 *
2199 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2200 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2201 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2202 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2203 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2204 * source code into the AST.
2205 */
2206typedef struct {
2207 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002208 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002209 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002210} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002211
2212/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00002213 * \brief A comment AST node.
2214 */
2215typedef struct {
Dmitri Gribenko7acbf002012-09-10 20:32:42 +00002216 const void *ASTNode;
2217 CXTranslationUnit TranslationUnit;
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00002218} CXComment;
2219
2220/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002221 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2222 *
2223 * @{
2224 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002225
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002226/**
2227 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2228 */
2229CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002230
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002231/**
2232 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2233 *
2234 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2235 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2236 */
2237CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2238
2239/**
2240 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2241 */
2242CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002243
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002244/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002245 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002246 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002247CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002248
2249/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002250 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2251 */
2252CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2253
2254/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002255 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2256 */
2257CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2258
2259/**
2260 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2261 */
2262CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2263
2264/**
2265 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2266 * reference.
2267 *
2268 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2269 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2270 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2271 */
2272CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2273
2274/**
2275 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2276 */
2277CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2278
2279/**
2280 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2281 */
2282CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2283
2284/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002285 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2286 */
2287CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2288
2289/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002290 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002291 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002292 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002293CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2294
2295/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002296 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2297 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002298 */
2299CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002300
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002301/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002302 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2303 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2304 */
2305CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2306
2307/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002308 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2309 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2310 */
2311CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2312
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002313/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002314 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2315 */
2316enum CXLinkageKind {
2317 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2318 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2319 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2320 /**
2321 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2322 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2323 */
2324 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2325 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2326 CXLinkage_Internal,
2327 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2328 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2329 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2330 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2331 CXLinkage_External
2332};
2333
2334/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002335 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002336 */
2337CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2338
2339/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002340 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2341 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002342 *
2343 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2344 *
2345 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2346 */
2347CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2348clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2349
2350/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002351 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2352 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2353 */
2354typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2355 /**
2356 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2357 * provides availability information.
2358 *
2359 * Possible values are "ios" or "macosx".
2360 */
2361 CXString Platform;
2362 /**
2363 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2364 */
2365 CXVersion Introduced;
2366 /**
2367 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2368 * still available).
2369 */
2370 CXVersion Deprecated;
2371 /**
2372 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2373 * is no longer available.
2374 */
2375 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2376 /**
2377 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2378 */
2379 int Unavailable;
2380 /**
2381 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2382 * suggest replacement APIs.
2383 */
2384 CXString Message;
2385} CXPlatformAvailability;
2386
2387/**
2388 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2389 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2390 *
2391 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2392 *
2393 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2394 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2395 *
2396 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2397 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2398 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2399 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002400 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002401 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2402 *
2403 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2404 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2405 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2406 *
2407 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2408 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2409 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2410 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2411 *
2412 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2413 * \c availability array.
2414 *
2415 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2416 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2417 *
2418 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2419 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2420 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2421 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2422 */
2423CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2424clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2425 int *always_deprecated,
2426 CXString *deprecated_message,
2427 int *always_unavailable,
2428 CXString *unavailable_message,
2429 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2430 int availability_size);
2431
2432/**
2433 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2434 */
2435CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2436clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2437
2438/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002439 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2440 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002441enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002442 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002443 CXLanguage_C,
2444 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002445 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002446};
2447
2448/**
2449 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2450 */
2451CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2452
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002453/**
2454 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2455 */
2456CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2457
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002458
2459/**
2460 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2461 */
2462typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2463
2464/**
2465 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2466 */
2467CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2468
2469/**
2470 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2471 */
2472CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2473
2474/**
2475 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2476 *
2477 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2478*/
2479CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2480 CXCursor cursor);
2481
2482/**
2483 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2484 *
2485 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2486*/
2487CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2488 CXCursor cursor);
2489
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002490/**
2491 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2492 *
2493 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2494 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2495 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2496 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2497 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2498 *
2499 * \code
2500 * class C {
2501 * void f();
2502 * };
2503 *
2504 * void C::f() { }
2505 * \endcode
2506 *
2507 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is the
2508 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2509 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
2510 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
2511 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2512 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2513 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2514 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2515 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2516 *
2517 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2518 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2519 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002520 *
2521 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002522 */
2523CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2524
2525/**
2526 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2527 *
2528 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2529 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2530 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2531 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2532 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2533 *
2534 * \code
2535 * class C {
2536 * void f();
2537 * };
2538 *
2539 * void C::f() { }
2540 * \endcode
2541 *
2542 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is the
2543 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2544 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
2545 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
2546 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2547 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2548 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2549 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2550 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2551 *
2552 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2553 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2554 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002555 *
2556 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2557 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002558 */
2559CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002560
2561/**
2562 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2563 * method.
2564 *
2565 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2566 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2567 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002568 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2569 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2570 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2571 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2572 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2573 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002574 *
2575 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2576 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2577 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2578 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2579 * base classes.
2580 *
2581 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2582 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2583 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2584 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2585 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2586 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2587 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2588 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2589 *
2590 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2591 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2592 * method overrides.
2593 *
2594 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2595 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2596 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2597 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2598 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2599 *
2600 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2601 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2602 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2603 */
2604CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2605 CXCursor **overridden,
2606 unsigned *num_overridden);
2607
2608/**
2609 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2610 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2611 */
2612CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2613
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002614/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002615 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2616 * cursor.
2617 */
2618CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2619
2620/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002621 * @}
2622 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002623
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002624/**
2625 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2626 *
2627 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2628 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2629 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2630 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2631 *
2632 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002633 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002634
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002635/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002636 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2637 * location in the source code.
2638 *
2639 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2640 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002641 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002642 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002643 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002644 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2645 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2646 *
2647 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2648 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002649 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002650CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002651
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002652/**
2653 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2654 * by the given cursor.
2655 *
2656 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002657 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2658 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2659 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002660 * source code.
2661 */
2662CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002663
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002664/**
2665 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002666 * the given cursor.
2667 *
2668 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2669 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002670 * ends with the last character withinin that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002671 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2672 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2673 * entity was actually used).
2674 */
2675CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002676
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002677/**
2678 * @}
2679 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002680
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002681/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002682 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2683 *
2684 * @{
2685 */
2686
2687/**
2688 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2689 */
2690enum CXTypeKind {
2691 /**
2692 * \brief Reprents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
2693 */
2694 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2695
2696 /**
2697 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2698 * interface.
2699 */
2700 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2701
2702 /* Builtin types */
2703 CXType_Void = 2,
2704 CXType_Bool = 3,
2705 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2706 CXType_UChar = 5,
2707 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2708 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2709 CXType_UShort = 8,
2710 CXType_UInt = 9,
2711 CXType_ULong = 10,
2712 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2713 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2714 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2715 CXType_SChar = 14,
2716 CXType_WChar = 15,
2717 CXType_Short = 16,
2718 CXType_Int = 17,
2719 CXType_Long = 18,
2720 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2721 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2722 CXType_Float = 21,
2723 CXType_Double = 22,
2724 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2725 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2726 CXType_Overload = 25,
2727 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2728 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2729 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2730 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
2731 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2732 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2733
2734 CXType_Complex = 100,
2735 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2736 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2737 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2738 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2739 CXType_Record = 105,
2740 CXType_Enum = 106,
2741 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2742 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002743 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2744 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002745 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002746 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002747 CXType_Vector = 113,
2748 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2749 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002750 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
2751 CXType_MemberPointer = 117
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002752};
2753
2754/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002755 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2756 */
2757enum CXCallingConv {
2758 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
2759 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
2760 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
2761 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
2762 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
2763 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
2764 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
2765 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuffa2020962012-10-16 22:30:41 +00002766 CXCallingConv_PnaclCall = 8,
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00002767 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00002768 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
2769 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002770
2771 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
2772 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
2773};
2774
2775
2776/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002777 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
2778 *
2779 */
2780typedef struct {
2781 enum CXTypeKind kind;
2782 void *data[2];
2783} CXType;
2784
2785/**
2786 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
2787 */
2788CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
2789
2790/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00002791 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
2792 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
2793 *
2794 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
2795 */
2796CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
2797
2798/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002799 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
2800 *
2801 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
2802 * returned.
2803 */
2804CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
2805
2806/**
2807 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
2808 *
2809 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
2810 * returned.
2811 */
2812CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
2813
2814/**
2815 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
2816 * long long.
2817 *
2818 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
2819 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2820 * must be verified before calling this function.
2821 */
2822CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
2823
2824/**
2825 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
2826 * long long.
2827 *
2828 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
2829 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2830 * must be verified before calling this function.
2831 */
2832CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
2833
2834/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00002835 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
2836 *
2837 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
2838 */
2839CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
2840
2841/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002842 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
2843 * cursor.
2844 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00002845 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
2846 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002847 */
2848CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
2849
2850/**
2851 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
2852 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00002853 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
2854 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
2855 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002856 */
2857CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
2858
2859/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002860 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002861 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002862 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
2863 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002864 */
2865CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
2866
2867/**
2868 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
2869 *
2870 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
2871 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
2872 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
2873 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
2874 */
2875CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
2876
2877/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002878 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
2879 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
2880 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00002881 */
2882CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
2883
2884/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002885 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
2886 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
2887 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00002888 */
2889CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
2890
2891/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002892 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
2893 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
2894 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00002895 */
2896CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
2897
2898/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002899 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002900 */
2901CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
2902
2903/**
2904 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
2905 */
2906CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
2907
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00002908/**
2909 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
2910 */
2911CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002912
2913/**
2914 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
2915 */
2916CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
2917
2918/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002919 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
2920 *
2921 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
2922 */
2923CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
2924
2925/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00002926 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002927 *
2928 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002929 */
2930CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
2931
2932/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00002933 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002934 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002935 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002936 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002937 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002938CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002939
2940/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00002941 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002942 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002943 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
2944 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002945 */
2946CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
2947
2948/**
2949 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002950 */
2951CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
2952
2953/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00002954 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002955 *
2956 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00002957 */
2958CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
2959
2960/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00002961 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
2962 * otherwise.
2963 */
2964CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
2965
2966/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002967 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
2968 *
2969 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
2970 * an invalid type is returned.
2971 */
2972CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
2973
2974/**
2975 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
2976 *
2977 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
2978 * -1 is returned.
2979 */
2980CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
2981
2982/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002983 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
2984 *
2985 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
2986 */
2987CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
2988
2989/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00002990 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002991 *
2992 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
2993 */
2994CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
2995
2996/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00002997 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
2998 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
2999 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3000 *
3001 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3002 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3003 */
3004enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3005 /**
3006 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3007 */
3008 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3009 /**
3010 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3011 */
3012 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3013 /**
3014 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3015 */
3016 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3017 /**
3018 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3019 */
3020 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3021 /**
3022 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3023 */
3024 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3025};
3026
3027/**
3028 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3029 * standard.
3030 *
3031 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3032 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3033 * is returned.
3034 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3035 * returned.
3036 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3037 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3038 */
3039CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3040
3041/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003042 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3043 *
3044 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3045 */
3046CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3047
3048/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003049 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3050 *
3051 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3052 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3053 * is returned.
3054 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3055 * returned.
3056 */
3057CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3058
3059/**
3060 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3061 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3062 *
3063 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3064 * is returned.
3065 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3066 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3067 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3068 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3069 * If the field's name S is not found,
3070 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3071 */
3072CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3073
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003074enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3075 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3076 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3077 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3078 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3079 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3080 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3081};
3082
3083/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003084 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3085 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3086 *
3087 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3088 * further.
3089 */
3090CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3091
3092/**
3093 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3094 * at given index.
3095 *
3096 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3097 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3098 */
3099CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3100
3101/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003102 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3103 *
3104 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3105 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3106 */
3107CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3108
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003109/**
3110 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3111 * bitfield.
3112 */
3113CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3114
3115/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003116 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3117 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3118 */
3119CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3120
3121/**
3122 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3123 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3124 */
3125enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3126 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3127 CX_CXXPublic,
3128 CX_CXXProtected,
3129 CX_CXXPrivate
3130};
3131
3132/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003133 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003134 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003135 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3136 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3137 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003138 */
3139CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3140
3141/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003142 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3143 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3144 *
3145 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3146 *
3147 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3148 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3149 */
3150CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3151
3152/**
3153 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3154 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3155 *
3156 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3157 *
3158 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3159 * the cursor.
3160 *
3161 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3162 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3163 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3164 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3165 */
3166CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3167 unsigned index);
3168
3169/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003170 * @}
3171 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003172
3173/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003174 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003175 *
3176 * @{
3177 */
3178
3179
3180/**
3181 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3182 * this function returns the collection element type.
3183 *
3184 */
3185CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3186
3187/**
3188 * @}
3189 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003190
3191/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003192 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3193 *
3194 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3195 * using cursors.
3196 *
3197 * @{
3198 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003199
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003200/**
3201 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3202 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3203 *
3204 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3205 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3206 */
3207enum CXChildVisitResult {
3208 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003209 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003210 */
3211 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003212 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003213 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3214 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3215 */
3216 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3217 /**
3218 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3219 * the same visitor and client data.
3220 */
3221 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3222};
3223
3224/**
3225 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3226 *
3227 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3228 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3229 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3230 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3231 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3232 *
3233 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3234 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3235 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003236typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3237 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003238 CXClientData client_data);
3239
3240/**
3241 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3242 *
3243 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3244 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3245 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3246 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3247 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3248 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003249 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003250 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003251 * definition, have no children).
3252 *
3253 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3254 * child of \p parent.
3255 *
3256 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3257 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3258 *
3259 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3260 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3261 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003262CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003263 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3264 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003265#ifdef __has_feature
3266# if __has_feature(blocks)
3267/**
3268 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3269 *
3270 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3271 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3272 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3273 *
3274 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3275 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3276 */
3277typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3278 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3279
3280/**
3281 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3282 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3283 */
3284unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3285 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
3286# endif
3287#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003288
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003289/**
3290 * @}
3291 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003292
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003293/**
3294 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3295 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003296 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003297 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3298 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3299 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3300 *
3301 * @{
3302 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003303
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003304/**
3305 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3306 * by the given cursor.
3307 *
3308 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3309 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3310 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3311 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3312 */
3313CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3314
3315/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003316 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3317 */
3318CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3319
3320/**
3321 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3322 */
3323CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003324 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003325 const char *category_name);
3326
3327/**
3328 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3329 */
3330CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3331 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3332
3333
3334/**
3335 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3336 * the USR for its containing class.
3337 */
3338CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3339 CXString classUSR);
3340
3341/**
3342 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3343 * the USR for its containing class.
3344 */
3345CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3346 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3347 CXString classUSR);
3348
3349/**
3350 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3351 * for its containing class.
3352 */
3353CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3354 CXString classUSR);
3355
3356/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003357 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3358 */
3359CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3360
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003361/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003362 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3363 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
3364 * objc methods and objc message expressions, there are multiple pieces for each
3365 * selector identifier.
3366 *
3367 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3368 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3369 *
3370 * \param options Reserved.
3371 */
3372CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3373 unsigned pieceIndex,
3374 unsigned options);
3375
3376/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003377 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3378 *
3379 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3380 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3381 * class template specialization.
3382 */
3383CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3384
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003385/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3386 * entity that it references.
3387 *
3388 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3389 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003390 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003391 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3392 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003393 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003394 */
3395CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003396
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003397/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003398 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3399 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3400 * that entity.
3401 *
3402 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3403 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3404 * definition. For example, given:
3405 *
3406 * \code
3407 * int f(int, int);
3408 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3409 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3410 * int f(int, int);
3411 * \endcode
3412 *
3413 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3414 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3415 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3416 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3417 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3418 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3419 * declaration).
3420 *
3421 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3422 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3423 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3424 */
3425CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3426
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003427/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003428 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3429 * is also a definition of that entity.
3430 */
3431CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3432
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003433/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003434 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3435 *
3436 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3437 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3438 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3439 *
3440 * \code
3441 * struct X;
3442 * struct X;
3443 * struct X {
3444 * int member;
3445 * };
3446 * \endcode
3447 *
3448 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3449 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3450 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3451 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3452 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3453 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3454 *
3455 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3456 */
3457CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3458
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003459
3460/**
3461 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in a objc method or
3462 * message expression, this returns the selector index.
3463 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003464 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003465 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3466 *
3467 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an objc method or message
3468 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3469 * otherwise.
3470 */
3471CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3472
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003473/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003474 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an ObjC message,
3475 * returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
3476 *
3477 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
3478 * For an ObjC message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super' or a
3479 * specific class.
3480 *
3481 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3482 * method/message, it will return zero.
3483 */
3484CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3485
3486/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003487 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an ObjC message, returns the CXType of the
3488 * receiver.
3489 */
3490CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3491
3492/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003493 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3494 */
3495typedef enum {
3496 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3497 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3498 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3499 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3500 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3501 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3502 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3503 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3504 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3505 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3506 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3507 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
3508 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800
3509} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3510
3511/**
3512 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3513 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3514 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3515 *
3516 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3517 */
3518CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3519 unsigned reserved);
3520
3521/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003522 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
3523 * ObjC method declarations.
3524 */
3525typedef enum {
3526 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3527 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3528 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3529 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3530 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3531 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3532 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3533} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3534
3535/**
3536 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an ObjC method or parameter
3537 * declaration, return the associated ObjC qualifiers for the return type or the
Argyrios Kyrtzidis982934e2013-04-19 00:51:52 +00003538 * parameter respectively. The bits are formed from CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003539 */
3540CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3541
3542/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003543 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an ObjC method or property declaration,
3544 * return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
3545 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3546 */
3547CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3548
3549/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003550 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3551 */
3552CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3553
3554/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003555 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3556 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3557 * with whitespace in between.
3558 */
3559CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3560
3561/**
3562 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3563 * comment text, including comment markers.
3564 */
3565CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
3566
3567/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003568 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3569 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
3570 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00003571 */
3572CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
3573
3574/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003575 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3576 * declaration), return the associated parsed comment as a
3577 * \c CXComment_FullComment AST node.
3578 */
3579CINDEX_LINKAGE CXComment clang_Cursor_getParsedComment(CXCursor C);
3580
3581/**
3582 * @}
3583 */
3584
3585/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003586 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
3587 *
3588 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
3589 *
3590 * @{
3591 */
3592
3593typedef void *CXModule;
3594
3595/**
3596 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
3597 */
3598CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
3599
3600/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003601 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003602 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00003603 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
3604 */
3605CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
3606
3607/**
3608 * \param Module a module object.
3609 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003610 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
3611 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
3612 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003613CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003614
3615/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003616 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003617 *
3618 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
3619 * will return "vector".
3620 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003621CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003622
3623/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003624 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003625 *
3626 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
3627 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003628CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003629
3630/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003631 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003632 *
3633 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
3634 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003635CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
3636 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003637
3638/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003639 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003640 *
3641 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
3642 *
3643 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
3644 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003645CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003646CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
3647 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003648
3649/**
3650 * @}
3651 */
3652
3653/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003654 * \defgroup CINDEX_COMMENT Comment AST introspection
3655 *
3656 * The routines in this group provide access to information in the
3657 * documentation comment ASTs.
3658 *
3659 * @{
3660 */
3661
3662/**
3663 * \brief Describes the type of the comment AST node (\c CXComment). A comment
3664 * node can be considered block content (e. g., paragraph), inline content
3665 * (plain text) or neither (the root AST node).
3666 */
3667enum CXCommentKind {
3668 /**
3669 * \brief Null comment. No AST node is constructed at the requested location
3670 * because there is no text or a syntax error.
3671 */
3672 CXComment_Null = 0,
3673
3674 /**
3675 * \brief Plain text. Inline content.
3676 */
3677 CXComment_Text = 1,
3678
3679 /**
3680 * \brief A command with word-like arguments that is considered inline content.
3681 *
3682 * For example: \\c command.
3683 */
3684 CXComment_InlineCommand = 2,
3685
3686 /**
3687 * \brief HTML start tag with attributes (name-value pairs). Considered
3688 * inline content.
3689 *
3690 * For example:
3691 * \verbatim
3692 * <br> <br /> <a href="http://example.org/">
3693 * \endverbatim
3694 */
3695 CXComment_HTMLStartTag = 3,
3696
3697 /**
3698 * \brief HTML end tag. Considered inline content.
3699 *
3700 * For example:
3701 * \verbatim
3702 * </a>
3703 * \endverbatim
3704 */
3705 CXComment_HTMLEndTag = 4,
3706
3707 /**
3708 * \brief A paragraph, contains inline comment. The paragraph itself is
3709 * block content.
3710 */
3711 CXComment_Paragraph = 5,
3712
3713 /**
3714 * \brief A command that has zero or more word-like arguments (number of
3715 * word-like arguments depends on command name) and a paragraph as an
3716 * argument. Block command is block content.
3717 *
3718 * Paragraph argument is also a child of the block command.
3719 *
3720 * For example: \\brief has 0 word-like arguments and a paragraph argument.
3721 *
3722 * AST nodes of special kinds that parser knows about (e. g., \\param
3723 * command) have their own node kinds.
3724 */
3725 CXComment_BlockCommand = 6,
3726
3727 /**
3728 * \brief A \\param or \\arg command that describes the function parameter
3729 * (name, passing direction, description).
3730 *
Dmitri Gribenkoadba9be2012-08-23 17:58:28 +00003731 * For example: \\param [in] ParamName description.
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003732 */
3733 CXComment_ParamCommand = 7,
3734
3735 /**
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00003736 * \brief A \\tparam command that describes a template parameter (name and
3737 * description).
3738 *
Dmitri Gribenkoadba9be2012-08-23 17:58:28 +00003739 * For example: \\tparam T description.
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00003740 */
3741 CXComment_TParamCommand = 8,
3742
3743 /**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003744 * \brief A verbatim block command (e. g., preformatted code). Verbatim
3745 * block has an opening and a closing command and contains multiple lines of
3746 * text (\c CXComment_VerbatimBlockLine child nodes).
3747 *
3748 * For example:
3749 * \\verbatim
3750 * aaa
3751 * \\endverbatim
3752 */
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00003753 CXComment_VerbatimBlockCommand = 9,
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003754
3755 /**
3756 * \brief A line of text that is contained within a
3757 * CXComment_VerbatimBlockCommand node.
3758 */
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00003759 CXComment_VerbatimBlockLine = 10,
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003760
3761 /**
3762 * \brief A verbatim line command. Verbatim line has an opening command,
3763 * a single line of text (up to the newline after the opening command) and
3764 * has no closing command.
3765 */
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00003766 CXComment_VerbatimLine = 11,
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003767
3768 /**
3769 * \brief A full comment attached to a declaration, contains block content.
3770 */
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00003771 CXComment_FullComment = 12
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003772};
3773
3774/**
Dmitri Gribenkod73e4ce2012-07-23 16:43:01 +00003775 * \brief The most appropriate rendering mode for an inline command, chosen on
3776 * command semantics in Doxygen.
3777 */
3778enum CXCommentInlineCommandRenderKind {
3779 /**
3780 * \brief Command argument should be rendered in a normal font.
3781 */
3782 CXCommentInlineCommandRenderKind_Normal,
3783
3784 /**
3785 * \brief Command argument should be rendered in a bold font.
3786 */
3787 CXCommentInlineCommandRenderKind_Bold,
3788
3789 /**
3790 * \brief Command argument should be rendered in a monospaced font.
3791 */
3792 CXCommentInlineCommandRenderKind_Monospaced,
3793
3794 /**
3795 * \brief Command argument should be rendered emphasized (typically italic
3796 * font).
3797 */
3798 CXCommentInlineCommandRenderKind_Emphasized
3799};
3800
3801/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003802 * \brief Describes parameter passing direction for \\param or \\arg command.
3803 */
3804enum CXCommentParamPassDirection {
3805 /**
3806 * \brief The parameter is an input parameter.
3807 */
3808 CXCommentParamPassDirection_In,
3809
3810 /**
3811 * \brief The parameter is an output parameter.
3812 */
3813 CXCommentParamPassDirection_Out,
3814
3815 /**
3816 * \brief The parameter is an input and output parameter.
3817 */
3818 CXCommentParamPassDirection_InOut
3819};
3820
3821/**
3822 * \param Comment AST node of any kind.
3823 *
3824 * \returns the type of the AST node.
3825 */
3826CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCommentKind clang_Comment_getKind(CXComment Comment);
3827
3828/**
3829 * \param Comment AST node of any kind.
3830 *
3831 * \returns number of children of the AST node.
3832 */
3833CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Comment_getNumChildren(CXComment Comment);
3834
3835/**
3836 * \param Comment AST node of any kind.
3837 *
Dmitri Gribenkoadba9be2012-08-23 17:58:28 +00003838 * \param ChildIdx child index (zero-based).
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003839 *
3840 * \returns the specified child of the AST node.
3841 */
3842CINDEX_LINKAGE
3843CXComment clang_Comment_getChild(CXComment Comment, unsigned ChildIdx);
3844
3845/**
3846 * \brief A \c CXComment_Paragraph node is considered whitespace if it contains
3847 * only \c CXComment_Text nodes that are empty or whitespace.
3848 *
3849 * Other AST nodes (except \c CXComment_Paragraph and \c CXComment_Text) are
3850 * never considered whitespace.
3851 *
3852 * \returns non-zero if \c Comment is whitespace.
3853 */
3854CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Comment_isWhitespace(CXComment Comment);
3855
3856/**
3857 * \returns non-zero if \c Comment is inline content and has a newline
3858 * immediately following it in the comment text. Newlines between paragraphs
3859 * do not count.
3860 */
3861CINDEX_LINKAGE
3862unsigned clang_InlineContentComment_hasTrailingNewline(CXComment Comment);
3863
3864/**
3865 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_Text AST node.
3866 *
3867 * \returns text contained in the AST node.
3868 */
3869CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_TextComment_getText(CXComment Comment);
3870
3871/**
3872 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_InlineCommand AST node.
3873 *
3874 * \returns name of the inline command.
3875 */
3876CINDEX_LINKAGE
3877CXString clang_InlineCommandComment_getCommandName(CXComment Comment);
3878
3879/**
3880 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_InlineCommand AST node.
3881 *
Dmitri Gribenkod73e4ce2012-07-23 16:43:01 +00003882 * \returns the most appropriate rendering mode, chosen on command
3883 * semantics in Doxygen.
3884 */
3885CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCommentInlineCommandRenderKind
3886clang_InlineCommandComment_getRenderKind(CXComment Comment);
3887
3888/**
3889 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_InlineCommand AST node.
3890 *
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003891 * \returns number of command arguments.
3892 */
3893CINDEX_LINKAGE
3894unsigned clang_InlineCommandComment_getNumArgs(CXComment Comment);
3895
3896/**
3897 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_InlineCommand AST node.
3898 *
3899 * \param ArgIdx argument index (zero-based).
3900 *
3901 * \returns text of the specified argument.
3902 */
3903CINDEX_LINKAGE
3904CXString clang_InlineCommandComment_getArgText(CXComment Comment,
3905 unsigned ArgIdx);
3906
3907/**
3908 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_HTMLStartTag or \c CXComment_HTMLEndTag AST
3909 * node.
3910 *
3911 * \returns HTML tag name.
3912 */
3913CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_HTMLTagComment_getTagName(CXComment Comment);
3914
3915/**
3916 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_HTMLStartTag AST node.
3917 *
3918 * \returns non-zero if tag is self-closing (for example, &lt;br /&gt;).
3919 */
3920CINDEX_LINKAGE
3921unsigned clang_HTMLStartTagComment_isSelfClosing(CXComment Comment);
3922
3923/**
3924 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_HTMLStartTag AST node.
3925 *
3926 * \returns number of attributes (name-value pairs) attached to the start tag.
3927 */
3928CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_HTMLStartTag_getNumAttrs(CXComment Comment);
3929
3930/**
3931 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_HTMLStartTag AST node.
3932 *
3933 * \param AttrIdx attribute index (zero-based).
3934 *
3935 * \returns name of the specified attribute.
3936 */
3937CINDEX_LINKAGE
3938CXString clang_HTMLStartTag_getAttrName(CXComment Comment, unsigned AttrIdx);
3939
3940/**
3941 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_HTMLStartTag AST node.
3942 *
3943 * \param AttrIdx attribute index (zero-based).
3944 *
3945 * \returns value of the specified attribute.
3946 */
3947CINDEX_LINKAGE
3948CXString clang_HTMLStartTag_getAttrValue(CXComment Comment, unsigned AttrIdx);
3949
3950/**
3951 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_BlockCommand AST node.
3952 *
3953 * \returns name of the block command.
3954 */
3955CINDEX_LINKAGE
3956CXString clang_BlockCommandComment_getCommandName(CXComment Comment);
3957
3958/**
3959 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_BlockCommand AST node.
3960 *
3961 * \returns number of word-like arguments.
3962 */
3963CINDEX_LINKAGE
3964unsigned clang_BlockCommandComment_getNumArgs(CXComment Comment);
3965
3966/**
3967 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_BlockCommand AST node.
3968 *
3969 * \param ArgIdx argument index (zero-based).
3970 *
3971 * \returns text of the specified word-like argument.
3972 */
3973CINDEX_LINKAGE
3974CXString clang_BlockCommandComment_getArgText(CXComment Comment,
3975 unsigned ArgIdx);
3976
3977/**
3978 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_BlockCommand or
3979 * \c CXComment_VerbatimBlockCommand AST node.
3980 *
3981 * \returns paragraph argument of the block command.
3982 */
3983CINDEX_LINKAGE
3984CXComment clang_BlockCommandComment_getParagraph(CXComment Comment);
3985
3986/**
3987 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_ParamCommand AST node.
3988 *
3989 * \returns parameter name.
3990 */
3991CINDEX_LINKAGE
3992CXString clang_ParamCommandComment_getParamName(CXComment Comment);
3993
3994/**
3995 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_ParamCommand AST node.
3996 *
3997 * \returns non-zero if the parameter that this AST node represents was found
3998 * in the function prototype and \c clang_ParamCommandComment_getParamIndex
3999 * function will return a meaningful value.
4000 */
4001CINDEX_LINKAGE
4002unsigned clang_ParamCommandComment_isParamIndexValid(CXComment Comment);
4003
4004/**
4005 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_ParamCommand AST node.
4006 *
4007 * \returns zero-based parameter index in function prototype.
4008 */
4009CINDEX_LINKAGE
4010unsigned clang_ParamCommandComment_getParamIndex(CXComment Comment);
4011
4012/**
4013 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_ParamCommand AST node.
4014 *
4015 * \returns non-zero if parameter passing direction was specified explicitly in
4016 * the comment.
4017 */
4018CINDEX_LINKAGE
4019unsigned clang_ParamCommandComment_isDirectionExplicit(CXComment Comment);
4020
4021/**
4022 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_ParamCommand AST node.
4023 *
4024 * \returns parameter passing direction.
4025 */
4026CINDEX_LINKAGE
4027enum CXCommentParamPassDirection clang_ParamCommandComment_getDirection(
4028 CXComment Comment);
4029
4030/**
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00004031 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_TParamCommand AST node.
4032 *
4033 * \returns template parameter name.
4034 */
4035CINDEX_LINKAGE
4036CXString clang_TParamCommandComment_getParamName(CXComment Comment);
4037
4038/**
4039 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_TParamCommand AST node.
4040 *
4041 * \returns non-zero if the parameter that this AST node represents was found
4042 * in the template parameter list and
4043 * \c clang_TParamCommandComment_getDepth and
4044 * \c clang_TParamCommandComment_getIndex functions will return a meaningful
4045 * value.
4046 */
4047CINDEX_LINKAGE
4048unsigned clang_TParamCommandComment_isParamPositionValid(CXComment Comment);
4049
4050/**
4051 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_TParamCommand AST node.
4052 *
4053 * \returns zero-based nesting depth of this parameter in the template parameter list.
4054 *
4055 * For example,
4056 * \verbatim
4057 * template<typename C, template<typename T> class TT>
4058 * void test(TT<int> aaa);
4059 * \endverbatim
4060 * for C and TT nesting depth is 0,
4061 * for T nesting depth is 1.
4062 */
4063CINDEX_LINKAGE
4064unsigned clang_TParamCommandComment_getDepth(CXComment Comment);
4065
4066/**
4067 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_TParamCommand AST node.
4068 *
4069 * \returns zero-based parameter index in the template parameter list at a
4070 * given nesting depth.
4071 *
4072 * For example,
4073 * \verbatim
4074 * template<typename C, template<typename T> class TT>
4075 * void test(TT<int> aaa);
4076 * \endverbatim
4077 * for C and TT nesting depth is 0, so we can ask for index at depth 0:
4078 * at depth 0 C's index is 0, TT's index is 1.
4079 *
4080 * For T nesting depth is 1, so we can ask for index at depth 0 and 1:
4081 * at depth 0 T's index is 1 (same as TT's),
4082 * at depth 1 T's index is 0.
4083 */
4084CINDEX_LINKAGE
4085unsigned clang_TParamCommandComment_getIndex(CXComment Comment, unsigned Depth);
4086
4087/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004088 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_VerbatimBlockLine AST node.
4089 *
4090 * \returns text contained in the AST node.
4091 */
4092CINDEX_LINKAGE
4093CXString clang_VerbatimBlockLineComment_getText(CXComment Comment);
4094
4095/**
4096 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_VerbatimLine AST node.
4097 *
4098 * \returns text contained in the AST node.
4099 */
4100CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_VerbatimLineComment_getText(CXComment Comment);
4101
4102/**
4103 * \brief Convert an HTML tag AST node to string.
4104 *
4105 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_HTMLStartTag or \c CXComment_HTMLEndTag AST
4106 * node.
4107 *
4108 * \returns string containing an HTML tag.
4109 */
4110CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_HTMLTagComment_getAsString(CXComment Comment);
4111
4112/**
4113 * \brief Convert a given full parsed comment to an HTML fragment.
4114 *
4115 * Specific details of HTML layout are subject to change. Don't try to parse
4116 * this HTML back into an AST, use other APIs instead.
4117 *
4118 * Currently the following CSS classes are used:
4119 * \li "para-brief" for \\brief paragraph and equivalent commands;
4120 * \li "para-returns" for \\returns paragraph and equivalent commands;
4121 * \li "word-returns" for the "Returns" word in \\returns paragraph.
4122 *
Dmitri Gribenko4c6d7a22012-07-21 01:47:43 +00004123 * Function argument documentation is rendered as a \<dl\> list with arguments
4124 * sorted in function prototype order. CSS classes used:
4125 * \li "param-name-index-NUMBER" for parameter name (\<dt\>);
4126 * \li "param-descr-index-NUMBER" for parameter description (\<dd\>);
4127 * \li "param-name-index-invalid" and "param-descr-index-invalid" are used if
4128 * parameter index is invalid.
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004129 *
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00004130 * Template parameter documentation is rendered as a \<dl\> list with
4131 * parameters sorted in template parameter list order. CSS classes used:
4132 * \li "tparam-name-index-NUMBER" for parameter name (\<dt\>);
4133 * \li "tparam-descr-index-NUMBER" for parameter description (\<dd\>);
Dmitri Gribenko58e41312012-08-01 23:47:30 +00004134 * \li "tparam-name-index-other" and "tparam-descr-index-other" are used for
Dmitri Gribenko34df2202012-07-31 22:37:06 +00004135 * names inside template template parameters;
4136 * \li "tparam-name-index-invalid" and "tparam-descr-index-invalid" are used if
4137 * parameter position is invalid.
4138 *
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004139 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_FullComment AST node.
4140 *
4141 * \returns string containing an HTML fragment.
4142 */
4143CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_FullComment_getAsHTML(CXComment Comment);
4144
4145/**
Dmitri Gribenko740c0fb2012-08-07 17:54:38 +00004146 * \brief Convert a given full parsed comment to an XML document.
4147 *
4148 * A Relax NG schema for the XML can be found in comment-xml-schema.rng file
4149 * inside clang source tree.
4150 *
Dmitri Gribenko740c0fb2012-08-07 17:54:38 +00004151 * \param Comment a \c CXComment_FullComment AST node.
4152 *
4153 * \returns string containing an XML document.
4154 */
Dmitri Gribenko7acbf002012-09-10 20:32:42 +00004155CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_FullComment_getAsXML(CXComment Comment);
Dmitri Gribenko740c0fb2012-08-07 17:54:38 +00004156
4157/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004158 * @}
4159 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004160
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004161/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004162 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4163 *
4164 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4165 * to C++ language features.
4166 *
4167 * @{
4168 */
4169
4170/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004171 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4172 * pure virtual.
4173 */
4174CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4175
4176/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004177 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4178 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004179 */
4180CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4181
4182/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004183 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4184 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4185 * one of the base classes.
4186 */
4187CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4188
4189/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004190 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4191 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4192 * the template.
4193 *
4194 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4195 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4196 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4197 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4198 *
4199 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4200 * declaration.
4201 *
4202 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4203 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4204 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4205 */
4206CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4207
4208/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004209 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4210 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4211 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4212 *
4213 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4214 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4215 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4216 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4217 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4218 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4219 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4220 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4221 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4222 *
4223 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4224 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4225 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4226 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4227 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4228 *
4229 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4230 * of a template.
4231 *
4232 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4233 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4234 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4235 */
4236CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004237
4238/**
4239 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4240 * covering that reference.
4241 *
4242 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4243 * an operator call.
4244 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4245 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4246 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4247 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4248 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4249 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004250 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004251 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4252 *
4253 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4254 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4255 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004256CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4257 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004258 unsigned PieceIndex);
4259
4260enum CXNameRefFlags {
4261 /**
4262 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4263 * range.
4264 */
4265 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4266
4267 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004268 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4269 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004270 */
4271 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4272
4273 /**
4274 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4275 *
4276 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4277 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4278 * \code
4279 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // ObjC
4280 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4281 * \endcode
4282 */
4283 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4284};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004285
4286/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004287 * @}
4288 */
4289
4290/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004291 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4292 *
4293 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4294 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4295 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004296 *
4297 * @{
4298 */
4299
4300/**
4301 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4302 */
4303typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4304 /**
4305 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4306 */
4307 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004308
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004309 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004310 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004311 */
4312 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004313
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004314 /**
4315 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4316 */
4317 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004318
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004319 /**
4320 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4321 */
4322 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004323
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004324 /**
4325 * \brief A comment.
4326 */
4327 CXToken_Comment
4328} CXTokenKind;
4329
4330/**
4331 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4332 */
4333typedef struct {
4334 unsigned int_data[4];
4335 void *ptr_data;
4336} CXToken;
4337
4338/**
4339 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4340 */
4341CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004342
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004343/**
4344 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4345 *
4346 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4347 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4348 */
4349CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004350
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004351/**
4352 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4353 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004354CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004355 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004356
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004357/**
4358 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4359 */
4360CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4361
4362/**
4363 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4364 * lexical tokens.
4365 *
4366 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4367 *
4368 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4369 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4370 *
4371 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4372 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4373 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4374 *
4375 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4376 * array.
4377 *
4378 */
4379CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4380 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004381
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004382/**
4383 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4384 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4385 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004386 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4387 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4388 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4389 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4390 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4391 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4392 *
4393 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4394 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4395 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4396 *
4397 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4398 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4399 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4400 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4401 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004402 *
4403 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4404 *
4405 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4406 *
4407 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4408 *
4409 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4410 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4411 */
4412CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4413 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4414 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004415
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004416/**
4417 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4418 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004419CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004420 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004421
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004422/**
4423 * @}
4424 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004425
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004426/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004427 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4428 *
4429 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4430 * be relied upon.
4431 *
4432 * @{
4433 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004434
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004435/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004436CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004437CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4438 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004439 const char **endBuf,
4440 unsigned *startLine,
4441 unsigned *startColumn,
4442 unsigned *endLine,
4443 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004444CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004445CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4446 unsigned stack_size);
4447
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004448/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004449 * @}
4450 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004451
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004452/**
4453 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4454 *
4455 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4456 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4457 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4458 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4459 * routines provide support for code completion.
4460 *
4461 * @{
4462 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004463
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004464/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004465 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4466 *
4467 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4468 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4469 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4470 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4471 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4472 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4473 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4474 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004475 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004476 */
4477typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004478
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004479/**
4480 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4481 */
4482typedef struct {
4483 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004484 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004485 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004486 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004487 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4488 * referring to.
4489 *
4490 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4491 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4492 */
4493 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004494
4495 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004496 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4497 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4498 */
4499 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4500} CXCompletionResult;
4501
4502/**
4503 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4504 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004505 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4506 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004507 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4508 */
4509enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4510 /**
4511 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4512 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4513 *
4514 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004515 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004516 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4517 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4518 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4519 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4520 *
4521 * \code
4522 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4523 * \endcode
4524 *
4525 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4526 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4527 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4528 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4529 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4530 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004531 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004532 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4533 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4534 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4535 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4536 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004537 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004538 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4539 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4540 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4541 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4542 */
4543 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4544 /**
4545 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004546 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004547 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004548 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4549 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004550 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4551 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4552 * chunk.
4553 */
4554 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4555 /**
4556 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4557 *
4558 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4559 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4560 * be selected.
4561 */
4562 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4563 /**
4564 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4565 *
4566 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4567 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4568 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4569 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4570 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4571 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4572 */
4573 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4574 /**
4575 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4576 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004577 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004578 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4579 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4580 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4581 * by code completion.
4582 */
4583 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4584 /**
4585 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4586 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4587 *
4588 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4589 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4590 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4591 *
4592 * \code
4593 * int add(int x, int y);
4594 * \endcode
4595 *
4596 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4597 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4598 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4599 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004600 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004601 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4602 */
4603 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4604 /**
4605 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4606 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4607 */
4608 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4609 /**
4610 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4611 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4612 */
4613 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4614 /**
4615 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4616 */
4617 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4618 /**
4619 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4620 */
4621 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4622 /**
4623 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4624 */
4625 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4626 /**
4627 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4628 */
4629 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4630 /**
4631 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4632 */
4633 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4634 /**
4635 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4636 */
4637 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4638 /**
4639 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4640 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004641 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4642 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004643 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004644 *
4645 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004646 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004647 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4648 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004649 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4650 /**
4651 * \brief A colon (':').
4652 */
4653 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4654 /**
4655 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4656 */
4657 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4658 /**
4659 * \brief An '=' sign.
4660 */
4661 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4662 /**
4663 * Horizontal space (' ').
4664 */
4665 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4666 /**
4667 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4668 * perform indentation.
4669 */
4670 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004671};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004672
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004673/**
4674 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4675 *
4676 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4677 *
4678 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4679 *
4680 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4681 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004682CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004683clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4684 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004685
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004686/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004687 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004688 * completion string.
4689 *
4690 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4691 *
4692 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4693 *
4694 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4695 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004696CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004697clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4698 unsigned chunk_number);
4699
4700/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004701 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004702 * within a completion string.
4703 *
4704 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4705 *
4706 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4707 *
4708 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004709 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004710 */
4711CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4712clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4713 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004714
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004715/**
4716 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4717 */
4718CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4719clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4720
4721/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004722 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4723 *
4724 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4725 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4726 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4727 *
4728 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4729 *
4730 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4731 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4732 */
4733CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4734clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4735
4736/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004737 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4738 * string refers to.
4739 *
4740 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4741 *
4742 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4743 */
4744CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4745clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4746
4747/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004748 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4749 * completion string.
4750 *
4751 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4752 *
4753 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4754 * string.
4755 */
4756CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4757clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4758
4759/**
4760 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4761 *
4762 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4763 *
4764 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4765 * completion string.
4766 *
4767 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4768 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4769 */
4770CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4771clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4772 unsigned annotation_number);
4773
4774/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004775 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4776 *
4777 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4778 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4779 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4780 * or protocol as its context.
4781 *
4782 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4783 * being queried.
4784 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004785 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004786 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004787 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004788 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4789 */
4790CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4791clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4792 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004793
4794/**
4795 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4796 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4797 */
4798CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4799clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4800
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004801/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004802 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4803 * definition cursor.
4804 *
4805 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4806 *
4807 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4808 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4809 */
4810CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4811clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4812
4813/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004814 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4815 *
4816 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004817 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004818 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4819 */
4820typedef struct {
4821 /**
4822 * \brief The code-completion results.
4823 */
4824 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4825
4826 /**
4827 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4828 * \c Results array.
4829 */
4830 unsigned NumResults;
4831} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4832
4833/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004834 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4835 * modify its behavior.
4836 *
4837 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4838 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4839 */
4840enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4841 /**
4842 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4843 * completions returned.
4844 */
4845 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4846
4847 /**
4848 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4849 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4850 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004851 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4852
4853 /**
4854 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4855 * completions returned.
4856 */
4857 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004858};
4859
4860/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004861 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4862 *
4863 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4864 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4865 */
4866enum CXCompletionContext {
4867 /**
4868 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4869 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4870 */
4871 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4872
4873 /**
4874 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4875 */
4876 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4877
4878 /**
4879 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4880 * should be included in the results.
4881 */
4882 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4883 /**
4884 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4885 * be included in the results.
4886 */
4887 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4888 /**
4889 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4890 * should be included in the results.
4891 */
4892 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4893 /**
4894 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4895 * included in the results.
4896 */
4897 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4898
4899 /**
4900 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4901 * operator should be included in the results.
4902 */
4903 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4904 /**
4905 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4906 * operator should be included in the results.
4907 */
4908 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4909 /**
4910 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4911 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4912 */
4913 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4914
4915 /**
4916 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4917 */
4918 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4919 /**
4920 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4921 */
4922 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4923 /**
4924 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4925 */
4926 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4927
4928 /**
4929 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4930 */
4931 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4932 /**
4933 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4934 * included in the results.
4935 */
4936 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4937 /**
4938 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4939 * the results.
4940 */
4941 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4942
4943 /**
4944 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4945 * in the results.
4946 */
4947 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4948 /**
4949 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4950 * the results.
4951 */
4952 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4953 /**
4954 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4955 * the results.
4956 */
4957 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4958 /**
4959 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4960 * in the results.
4961 */
4962 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4963 /**
4964 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4965 * the results.
4966 */
4967 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4968 /**
4969 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4970 * the results.
4971 */
4972 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4973
4974 /**
4975 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4976 * the results.
4977 */
4978 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4979
4980 /**
4981 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4982 */
4983 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4984
4985 /**
4986 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4987 */
4988 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4989};
4990
4991/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004992 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4993 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4994 */
4995CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4996
4997/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004998 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4999 *
5000 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
5001 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
5002 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
5003 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
5004 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
5005 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
5006 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
5007 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
5008 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
5009 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
5010 *
5011 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
5012 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
5013 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
5014 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
5015 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
5016 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
5017 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
5018 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
5019 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
5020 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
5021 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
5022 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
5023 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
5024 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
5025 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
5026 * have a lower latency.
5027 *
5028 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
5029 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
5030 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
5031 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
5032 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
5033 *
5034 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
5035 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
5036 * included in the translation unit.
5037 *
5038 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
5039 *
5040 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
5041 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
5042 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
5043 *
5044 * \param unsaved_files the Tiles that have not yet been saved to disk
5045 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
5046 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
5047 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
5048 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
5049 * this function returns.
5050 *
5051 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
5052 * unsaved_files.
5053 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005054 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
5055 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
5056 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
5057 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
5058 * of code-completion options.
5059 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005060 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
5061 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
5062 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
5063 * completion fails, returns NULL.
5064 */
5065CINDEX_LINKAGE
5066CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5067 const char *complete_filename,
5068 unsigned complete_line,
5069 unsigned complete_column,
5070 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005071 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5072 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005073
5074/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00005075 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
5076 * order.
5077 *
5078 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
5079 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
5080 */
5081CINDEX_LINKAGE
5082void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
5083 unsigned NumResults);
5084
5085/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005086 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
5087 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005088CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005089void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00005090
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005091/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005092 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
5093 * location where code completion was performed.
5094 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005095CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005096unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5097
5098/**
5099 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
5100 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005101 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005102 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
5103 *
5104 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
5105 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
5106 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005107CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005108CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5109 unsigned Index);
5110
5111/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005112 * \brief Determines what compeltions are appropriate for the context
5113 * the given code completion.
5114 *
5115 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5116 *
5117 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
5118 * along with the given code completion results.
5119 */
5120CINDEX_LINKAGE
5121unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
5122 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00005123
5124/**
5125 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
5126 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
5127 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
5128 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
5129 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
5130 *
5131 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5132 *
5133 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
5134 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
5135 * information, this value will be true.
5136 *
5137 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
5138 * container
5139 */
5140CINDEX_LINKAGE
5141enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
5142 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5143 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
5144
5145/**
5146 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5147 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5148 * function will return the empty string.
5149 *
5150 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5151 *
5152 * \returns the USR for the container
5153 */
5154CINDEX_LINKAGE
5155CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005156
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005157
5158/**
5159 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5160 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5161 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5162 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5163 *
5164 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5165 *
5166 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5167 * for an Objective-C message send.
5168 */
5169CINDEX_LINKAGE
5170CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5171
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005172/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005173 * @}
5174 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005175
5176
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005177/**
5178 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5179 *
5180 * @{
5181 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005182
5183/**
5184 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5185 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5186 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005187CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005188
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005189
5190/**
5191 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5192 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005193 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5194 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005195 */
5196CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5197
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005198 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005199 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005200 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5201 *
5202 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005203 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005204 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5205 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5206 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5207 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5208 */
5209typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5210 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5211 unsigned include_len,
5212 CXClientData client_data);
5213
5214/**
5215 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5216 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5217 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5218 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5219 */
5220CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5221 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5222 CXClientData client_data);
5223
5224/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005225 * @}
5226 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005227
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005228/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5229 *
5230 * @{
5231 */
5232
5233/**
5234 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5235 */
5236typedef void *CXRemapping;
5237
5238/**
5239 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5240 *
5241 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5242 *
5243 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5244 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5245 */
5246CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5247
5248/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005249 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5250 *
5251 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5252 *
5253 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5254 *
5255 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5256 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5257 */
5258CINDEX_LINKAGE
5259CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5260 unsigned numFiles);
5261
5262/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005263 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5264 */
5265CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5266
5267/**
5268 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5269 *
5270 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5271 *
5272 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5273 * is associated with.
5274 */
5275CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5276 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5277
5278/**
5279 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5280 */
5281CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5282
5283/**
5284 * @}
5285 */
5286
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005287/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5288 *
5289 * @{
5290 */
5291
5292enum CXVisitorResult {
5293 CXVisit_Break,
5294 CXVisit_Continue
5295};
5296
5297typedef struct {
5298 void *context;
5299 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5300} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5301
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005302typedef enum {
5303 /**
5304 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5305 */
5306 CXResult_Success = 0,
5307 /**
5308 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5309 */
5310 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5311 /**
5312 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5313 * CXVisit_Break)
5314 */
5315 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5316
5317} CXResult;
5318
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005319/**
5320 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5321 *
5322 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5323 *
5324 * \param file to search for references.
5325 *
5326 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5327 * each reference found.
5328 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5329 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005330 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005331 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005332 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005333CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5334 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005335
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005336/**
5337 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5338 *
5339 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5340 *
5341 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5342 *
5343 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5344 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005345 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005346 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005347 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005348CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5349 CXFile file,
5350 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005351
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005352#ifdef __has_feature
5353# if __has_feature(blocks)
5354
5355typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5356 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5357
5358CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005359CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5360 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005361
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005362CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005363CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5364 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005365
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005366# endif
5367#endif
5368
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005369/**
5370 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5371 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005372typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005373
5374/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005375 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5376 */
5377typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5378
5379/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005380 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5381 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005382 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005383typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005384
5385/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005386 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5387 * or module).
5388 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005389typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005390
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005391/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005392 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005393 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005394typedef struct {
5395 void *ptr_data[2];
5396 unsigned int_data;
5397} CXIdxLoc;
5398
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005399/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005400 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005401 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005402typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005403 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005404 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005405 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005406 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005407 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005408 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005409 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005410 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005411 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005412 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005413 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005414 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005415 int isImport;
5416 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005417 /**
5418 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5419 * import.
5420 */
5421 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005422} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5423
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005424/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005425 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005426 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005427typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005428 /**
5429 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5430 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005431 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005432 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005433 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5434 */
5435 CXModule module;
5436 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005437 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005438 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005439 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005440 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005441 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005442 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005443 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005444 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005445
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005446} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5447
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005448typedef enum {
5449 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5450 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5451 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5452 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5453 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5454 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5455
5456 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5457 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5458 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5459
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005460 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5461 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5462 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5463 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005464
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005465 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5466 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5467 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005468
5469 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5470 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5471 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5472 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5473 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5474 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005475 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5476 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5477 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5478 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5479 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5480
5481} CXIdxEntityKind;
5482
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005483typedef enum {
5484 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5485 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5486 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5487 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5488} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5489
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005490/**
5491 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5492 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5493 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5494 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5495 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5496 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5497 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5498 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5499 */
5500typedef enum {
5501 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5502 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5503 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5504 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5505} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5506
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005507typedef enum {
5508 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5509 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5510 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5511 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5512} CXIdxAttrKind;
5513
5514typedef struct {
5515 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5516 CXCursor cursor;
5517 CXIdxLoc loc;
5518} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5519
5520typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005521 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5522 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5523 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5524 const char *name;
5525 const char *USR;
5526 CXCursor cursor;
5527 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5528 unsigned numAttributes;
5529} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5530
5531typedef struct {
5532 CXCursor cursor;
5533} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5534
5535typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005536 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5537 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5538 CXCursor classCursor;
5539 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5540} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5541
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005542typedef enum {
5543 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5544} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5545
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005546typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005547 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005548 CXCursor cursor;
5549 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005550 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5551 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005552 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005553 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5554 */
5555 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005556 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005557 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005558 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005559 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005560 /**
5561 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
5562 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit objc methods for properties.
5563 */
5564 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005565 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5566 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005567
5568 unsigned flags;
5569
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005570} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005571
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005572typedef enum {
5573 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5574 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5575 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5576} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005577
5578typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005579 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005580 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5581} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005582
5583typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005584 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5585 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005586 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005587} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005588
5589typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005590 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5591 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005592 CXIdxLoc loc;
5593} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5594
5595typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005596 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005597 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005598} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005599
5600typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005601 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5602 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5603 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5604} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005605
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005606typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005607 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5608 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5609 CXCursor classCursor;
5610 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5611 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5612} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5613
5614typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005615 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005616 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5617 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5618} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5619
5620typedef struct {
5621 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005622 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5623 unsigned numBases;
5624} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5625
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005626/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005627 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005628 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005629typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005630 /**
5631 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5632 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005633 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005634 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005635 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an ObjC method via the
5636 * dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005637 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005638 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005639} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5640
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005641/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005642 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005643 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005644typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005645 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005646 /**
5647 * \brief Reference cursor.
5648 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005649 CXCursor cursor;
5650 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005651 /**
5652 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5653 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005654 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005655 /**
5656 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5657 *
5658 * \code
5659 * Foo *var;
5660 * \endcode
5661 *
5662 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005663 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5664 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005665 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005666 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005667 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005668 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005669 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005670 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005671} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5672
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005673/**
5674 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5675 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5676 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005677typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005678 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005679 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5680 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5681 */
5682 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5683
5684 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005685 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005686 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005687 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005688 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005689
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005690 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005691 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005692
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005693 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005694 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005695 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005696 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005697 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005698
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005699 /**
5700 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5701 *
5702 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5703 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005704 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5705 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005706 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005707 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005708 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005709
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005710 /**
5711 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5712 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005713 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005714 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005715
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005716 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005717 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005718
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005719 /**
5720 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5721 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005722 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005723 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005724
5725} IndexerCallbacks;
5726
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005727CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005728CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5729clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005730
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005731CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5732clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5733
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005734CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005735const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5736clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5737
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005738CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5739clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005740
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005741CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5742clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5743
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005744CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5745clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5746
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005747CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5748clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5749
5750/**
5751 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5752 * container.
5753 */
5754CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5755clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5756
5757/**
5758 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5759 * container.
5760 */
5761CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5762clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5763
5764/**
5765 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5766 */
5767CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5768clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5769
5770/**
5771 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5772 */
5773CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5774clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5775
5776/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005777 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5778 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005779 */
5780typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5781
5782/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005783 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5784 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005785 *
5786 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5787 */
5788CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5789
5790/**
5791 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5792 *
5793 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5794 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5795 */
5796CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5797
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005798typedef enum {
5799 /**
5800 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5801 */
5802 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5803
5804 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005805 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5806 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5807 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005808 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005809 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5810
5811 /**
5812 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5813 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5814 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005815 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5816
5817 /**
5818 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5819 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5820 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005821 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5822
5823 /**
5824 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5825 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005826 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5827
5828 /**
5829 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
5830 * indexing session assosiated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
5831 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5832 */
5833 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5834
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005835} CXIndexOptFlags;
5836
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005837/**
5838 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005839 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005840 *
5841 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5842 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5843 *
5844 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5845 * implements.
5846 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005847 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005848 * passed in index_callbacks.
5849 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005850 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5851 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005852 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005853 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5854 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005855 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005856 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
5857 * recover. If there is a failure from which the there is no recovery, returns
5858 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005859 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005860 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005861 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005862CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005863 CXClientData client_data,
5864 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5865 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5866 unsigned index_options,
5867 const char *source_filename,
5868 const char * const *command_line_args,
5869 int num_command_line_args,
5870 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5871 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5872 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5873 unsigned TU_options);
5874
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005875/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005876 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005877 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005878 *
5879 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5880 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5881 *
5882 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5883 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5884 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5885 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005886 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005887 *
5888 * \returns If there is a failure from which the there is no recovery, returns
5889 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5890 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005891CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005892 CXClientData client_data,
5893 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5894 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005895 unsigned index_options,
5896 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005897
5898/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005899 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5900 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5901 *
5902 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5903 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5904 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5905 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005906CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005907 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005908 CXFile *file,
5909 unsigned *line,
5910 unsigned *column,
5911 unsigned *offset);
5912
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005913/**
5914 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5915 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005916CINDEX_LINKAGE
5917CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5918
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005919/**
5920 * @}
5921 */
5922
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00005923/**
5924 * @}
5925 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005926
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00005927#ifdef __cplusplus
5928}
5929#endif
5930#endif
5931